Home

2008 Jeep Compass Owners Manual - Dealer e

1. 4 126 127 244 HOS S 1222 eR ges 336 Master Cylinder 0 00000 337 PARKING erue DE Add eee ome tae es 241 Warning Light us icra eo der a ee ate ata 163 Brakes i292 db dE re e 243 335 Brake Transmission Interlock 233 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 65 Bulb Replacement 000004 350 351 Bulbs Light ovr ERR eR 350 Calibration Compass 0000005 180 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 360 Capacities Fluid coucou ieee vee ciate 360 Caps Filler Fuel 008 42 o tests ser ed da she Gan ee hee 279 Oil Engine scies cannes ppi e 312 319 Car Washes seme x ERA Re ER EE 342 Carbon Monoxide Warning 278 Cargo Area Cover 150 Cargo Area Features 54 2 2 eere ed ea 148 Cargo Compartment LIGNE DUI 148 Luggage Carrier desk rete heme 154 Cargo Light scis pepetet eed bee d edes 148 Cargo Load Floor 6 6 0 00 eee ene 150 Cargo Tie DOWNS cees sasda e ya ea 151 HO 384 INDEX ae Carrier Luggage 2 c m RR R 154 Catalytic Converter 2 6 cerae c3 ea bn d 321 Caution Exhaust Gas leen 66 CD Compact Disc Player 183 190 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 214 Cellular Phone 206 aces verbes e Ress 76 214 Center High Mounted Stop Light 358 Chains Tite es 44444 eR Beet HER 265 Changing A Flat Tire 0 0 0 0 000 298 Chart Tire Sizing 2 6 ca eae eda
2. 298 H Jacking And Tire Changing 298 Jack Location llle 299 Spare Tire Stowage 0 eee 299 Preparations For Jacking 299 li Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Jacking Instructions 000 300 Bl Jump Starting Procedures Due To A Low Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle 306 With Ignition Key 0 000000 306 Without The Ignition Key 307 296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE HAZARD WARNING FLASHER 81a39819 Hazard Warning Flasher The flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Depress the switch and both cluster indicators and all front and rear directional signals will flash Depress the switch again to turn Hazard Warning Flashers off Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transaxle in ne
3. 88 Advanced Phone Connectivity 93 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System eee eee 95 General Information 103 MM Seats er oo ne Phen bode drei IT CT TTE 103 Front Seat Adjustment 103 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 70 Manual Seat Height Adjustment lt Equipped 3 ee tere ems 104 Manual Lumbar If Equipped 105 Driver s Seat Back Recline 105 Adjustable Head Restraints 106 Heated Seats If Equipped 107 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 108 Folding Rear Seat 000005 109 Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped 110 ll To Open And Close The Hood 112 p Lights re 113 Map Reading Lights 113 Multi Function Control Lever 114 Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped Lights On Reminder Fog Lights If Equipped MUG SIGN AIS secs euo ex Rowe cae Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Passing Light Off Road Lights If Equipped Windshield Wipers And Washers Windshield Washers Mist Feature 0 0000 eee eee ee Windshield Wiper Operation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
4. 19 lll Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped 19 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 20 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 21 Auto DOWN isn 42 he de ce EROR RO RO EUR Ke Rn 31 Using The Panic Alarm 21 Window Lockout Switch 32 To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 22 W Liftgate se phone pede ds 4 pee tn ex 32 Programming Additional Transmitters 22 W Occupant Restraints exe En RR Rx 34 General Information 000 24 Lap Shoulder Belts 000 35 Battery Replacement 06 24 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 39 ll Door Locks cesse b eR 26 Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Manual Door Locks o cesare ose 26 Operating Instructions aaau aaa 40 E A llssitercriemcusrara 27 Seat Belt Pretensioners 6 43 Chl roo Dor Lock System p mu Rear Doors If Equipped 30 ll Power Windows If Equipped 3l Seat Belt Extender 0 0000 45 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 46 Power Window Switches sn 31 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Driver And Front Passenger Supplementa
5. Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near sea coast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use Mopar
6. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 235 The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P Park position e When shifting into P Park firmly move the lever all the way forward until it stops e Look at the shift indicator window on the shifter bezel to ensure it is in the P Park position e You must depress the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the P Park position CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of P Park you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering wheel and shift lever are released Other wise damage to the steering column or shifter could result You must also depress the brake pedal R Reverse Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Engine may be started in this range D Drive This should be used for most driving and provides the best ratio for optimum driveability fuel economy and performance L Low This range should be used for maximum engine braking when descending steep grades In this range the trans axle will ratio up only to prevent transaxle damage or engine over speed while ratioing down will occur as early as possible 236 STARTING AND OPERATING ME AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED Autostick Operation Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control Autostick allows you to max
7. 6 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 7 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 8 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate 9 If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 10 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section in this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has side curtain airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Air Bag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restr
8. Phone button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espa
9. position They should both go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warn ing Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESP Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit ope
10. Have the vehicle checked immediately 244 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ee ee The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle ENS stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond wheel lock up that afforded by the condition of the vehicle WARNING brakes and tires or the traction afforded Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds ies If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of
11. If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 15 Transmission Temperature Warning Light During sustained high speed driving on hot days the automatic transaxle oil may become too hot If this happens the transmission over heat indicator light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion 16 Security Alarm System Indicator Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the alarm system is arming The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed 17 Temperature Gauge If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark turn the engine off immediately and call for service There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioning is on
12. ses c ae ind Ch ae eS 260 Flat Changing 2 0 64 0ike RR ia eas 302 General Information illl 256 Pigh Speedi iiu der Selle boing Be wigs gk e 259 Inflation Pressures 0 0 00 eee eee 257 Jacking secu An coh pad de ede ode ca ee in 298 Lif of Tires ia aires awd a bees E GO A 262 Load Capacity uus sarei s pas 252 253 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 266 Quality Grading 000000 378 Radial 222 sea eae oR E wee ea Ba EME a 259 Replacement iussis ker EISE Usa oes 263 R otatiOn 4d hes x eee Me EU 265 Safety 2522lse qBI Pese E coed e es 247 256 SIZES oii ss aue iex NS EN NUES 8 249 SNOW Ties 233434 ese Singh Awa a Red ed 275 Spare Tite iva ses acte doeet dnb RR AI a 299 SPINNING xia Sel ase edd eed 261 Tread Wear Indicators 000005 262 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 286 en INDEX 397 TOWING itii e ERE Gp RO ede Rea a Re 281 Disabled Vehicle llle 306 G de 52 veru E RSS dae bes Eo Y 285 Recreational lees 293 Weight 22m a exa cds e Ea 285 Traction soska qux oe INR ee ae oR 239 Trailer Towing 6 ee 281 Cooling System Tips 000 293 Hitch s ciam eua eue Cea Pewee DEA 284 Minimum Requirements 05 287 Trailer and Tongue Weight 286 WHINE 2 ooh Oe rc ene ek en eb eee EM 291 Trailer Towing Guide lt s cresce setatis tes 285 Trauer W ight sessirnar ere ERES ES 285 Transaxle
13. you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phone book entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phone book entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phone book from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phone book entry in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phone
14. 0 00 0 143 Pinch Protect Override 0 143 Venting Sunroof Express 143 Sunshade Operation 0 0 143 Wind Buffeting sides be Sye ee rule 143 Sunroof Maintenance 06 144 Ignition Off Operation 00 144 BE lectrical Power Outlets If Equipped 144 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 146 la Console Features yxy sete re Ya Red SOR 147 Mi Cargo Area Features 0 00000 148 Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight If Equipped 148 Cargo Cover If Equipped 150 Removable Load Floor 150 Cargo Tie Down Loops 05 151 Fold Down Speakers If Equipped 152 Bi Rear Window Features esee 152 Rear Window Wiper Washer 152 Rear Window Defroster sies 153 ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 154 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Adjus
15. 276 Gauges Coolant Temperature llle 164 Fuel 222 dscGeewx na e ee oe baa PEEXS EA 160 Odomeler exce carts VES aoe RYAN CA 167 Tachometer lle 162 Gearshift s yace meuar eR Ea PAPA PRA 234 General Information 18 103 274 General Maintenance 0 0 0 0 cease 317 Glass Cleaning xsv ea hist need tes 345 Gross Axle Weight Rating 282 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 281 Hands Free Phone UConnect 76 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water ELT 239 Hazard Warning Flasher 296 Head Restraints 0 0 eee eee 106 Headlights e erae bee emn 351 Cleaning a ce ha e Rae dep depot 345 High Beam sy suas cia be bees 117 161 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 117 Passing sowie ner Oe iow gs CRDI eke 118 Replacing i siege ade a in ee ar 351 Switi ses ac dad kick be kd ata bhadataees 114 Heated Seats 0 cee eee 107 Hitches Trailer Towing 0 0 00 284 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 134 Hood Release oi ictsi peresi ERR s 112 OSES se kG rcn e A ataa PEENE ee Ae ee 335 Ignition D 12 Key 34 Ge Mahe ad HER Ga ea Pee E dS 12 Ignition Key Removal less 12 Immobilizer Sentry Key liess 15 19 en INDEX 389 Intant Restraint sc0 aad daa ee Wee de as ee es 57 Information Center Vehicle LL 171 Inside Rear
16. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera poorly The instability could cause an accident Al tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine and cold tire inflation pressures them with other types of tires WARNING m Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your mum load is dangerous The added strain on your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 260 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to
17. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when clean
18. and follow the prompts e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose e You can also press the Voice Recognition button the phone you wish to delete anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 feet the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the Phone button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UCon nect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for 5 seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For bes
19. avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom mended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected before rotating The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE E E m iti E MM Ed 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe IF EQUIPPED The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire
20. esses 115 Dimmer Switch Headlight 114 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 130 Engine Temperature Warning 163 BOR enses testo ise hod onde he 116 169 353 Headlight Switch 00 05 114 Headlights 2 020 reneste TER ie 114 High Beam Indicator 200 161 Instrument Cluster 000000 114 License cerce espe GA de feeder aca ee 356 Lights On Reminder das sias 115 Low Fuel aue dte rmx eer Ere E 161 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 168 Map Reading 4 sp ere rr ERRARE RE be 113 Off Road ec e eue ic RR 118 Oil Pressure ise neres heme Rae Poe d v 161 Seat Belt Reminder isses 162 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 164 Traction Control i sese emm 130 Turn Signal ssssss 114 117 161 354 Voltage deu audet ea E oed oet i been EU alee A 160 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 160 Loading Vehicle llle 281 Tres 2uekwescc o em a ave ake ea EU REA 252 Locks Child Protection 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee 30 po A 26 POWEr DOOF 534242334 ede res 27 Steering Wheel csse od kh eee B 14 Lubrication Body 0 408 e545 404 s taasi 327 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 154 Lumbar Support seris se rentis eat ebook ES 105 Maintenance Free Battery en INDEX 391 Maintenance General 0 0 0 0 00 eee 317 Main
21. or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING Deployed airbags can t protect you in another colli sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Enhanced Accident Response System In the even
22. start the vehicle press the G5 button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise position Press the 4 VERY HOT button Set the Mode control at or between 4 and 53 Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the Ic button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the gt button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the G5 button to turn recirculate off If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between lt 4 and J then turn the air 6468 conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 6 TL C the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between 3 and S COLD DRY Press the gt button to turn recirculate off CONDITIONS Set the Mode control at ot near p If itis sunny you may want more upper air In abe this case set the Mode control at or between F and 2 In very cold weather if you need ext
23. the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s from Tire Placard weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ib 100 Ibs 80 Ibs 865 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 255 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 32
24. turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 18 Cruise Indicator Light If Equipped cruise TS indicator shows that the Speed Control System is ON 19 Cruise SET Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is SET 20 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 21 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss vehicle placard or tire infla
25. 123 WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The speed control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 818f2005 Speed Control Location To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pu
26. A lamp will illu minate when you are in recir culate mode Only use the re circulate mode to temporarily block out any outside odors T smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather RECIRCULATE B15fb NOTE Continuous use of the recirculate mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes Air Filtration System If Equipped An air filter is included in the optional Security Group Filter media includes a particle filtration layer and a charcoal layer The filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts only on air coming from outside the vehicle it does not filter air inside the passenger compartment See the maintenance schedule for the filter change interval The air filter change interval coincides with engine oil and filter change intervals As with oil changes the interval is shorter for heavy duty service or dusty conditions See your authorized dealer for service 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Tips WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows
27. AND OPERATING ME AutoStick General Information 237 ll Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped 238 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 238 Acceleration ema eR ERR end 238 TractiOD secorir eros RE ae E Raus 239 Bl Driving Through Water 0 239 Flowing Rising Water 00 240 Shallow Standing Water 240 W Parking Brake 2224s RR 241 W Brake Seis MC i ee we eee eee 243 Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped ocu e bre GPSS ER S 244 ll Power Steering B Tite Safety Information ss ne 247 Tire Markings 2 2024 ee aes 247 Tire Identification Number TIN 251 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 252 Bl Tires General Information 256 Tire Pressure as gies hr eee e 256 Tire Inflation Pressures 257 Radial Ply Tir s eese ka eo a sts 259 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 260 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 260 Tire Spinning a3 ave pase ro Re tendra a ss 261 Tread Wear Indicators 262 Life Of Tire o c o Sab eee ee oa as 262 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 225 Replacement Tires pa cesas roaie ante anaes 263 Alignment And Balance 264 M Tire Chains 2st tw ntact ions d
28. CO which is colorless and odorless You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill At the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule the system should be drained flushed and refilled Refer to Section 8 of this manual If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rins
29. Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid trans mission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately Information Provided by DEALER UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Mirrors oc ce oes ERE Y IR oe e Rs Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped Outside Mirror Driver s Side Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Power Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped Vanity Mirrors If Equipped Sun Visor Sliding Feature ll Hands Free Communication UConnect I Equipped tae cu ene EE ADR ee as Operationiss swisha ee race drm A RUN Obr a 78 Phone Call Features llli 85 UConnect System Features
30. Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Special Care e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove similar cause which destroys the paint and protective heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabra coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sive non acidic cleaner
31. Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped lime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seatbelt status e Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Transmission gear selection E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you a
32. Diagnostic System OBDII 313 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 314 Hi Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs ilg ase kradita Ro Rs 314 B Replacement Parts 55soos a n 316 H Dealer Service 0 0 2 cee eee 316 Wi Maintenance Procedures 005 317 Engine Qil rzkesc ctr baee ras 317 Drive Belt Check Condition 320 Spark PICS rectae degree eite o 320 Catalytic Converter cacera susresti enok 321 Crankcase Emission Control System Fuel Filtet lt tact zie bm Air Cleaner Element Filter Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance 325 Power Steering Fluid Check 326 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Front Suspension Ball Joints 327 Body Lubrication 0 00 0 327 Windshield Wiper Blades 328 Windshield Washer Reservoir 328 Exhaust System mss eres a roS Eee ga 328 Cooling System sss oe s pude ER Rep 329 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 335 Fuel System Connections 335 Brake 5ystem a oss ep n Res 335 Automatic Transaxle CVT 339 Manual Transaxle 0 000005 339 Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD AWD Models Only zoten nia eea Ea ean aE 340 Power Transfe
33. Do not use scouring pads steel sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon Wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar sibility of the owner cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi purpose cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth
34. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running Lights DRL at DRL intensity lower whenever the ignition is on the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the gear shift is in any position except park 3o Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Dimmer Control 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Fog Lights If Equipped NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals ms Front Fog Lights Control ED The front fog light switch is on the Multi Function Control Lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull Turn Signal Control out the end of the control lever m es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Move the Multi Function Control Lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a ver
35. Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency En9lish Phonebook edia A e mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Setup Phonebook Flowchart Flowchart Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y at a time Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit System Lists override pin code Phones Select phone ren p to be deleted ISP HOUSES P i Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System S
36. a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press Phone button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single
37. and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display NOTE The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF LOCK posi tion to the ACC position the radio is turned on and the radio was previously in the AUX mode SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function MUTE Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function RND SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Mode Button Auxiliary Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE UConnect section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual SALES CO
38. belted at all times e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Lap Shoulder Belts inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap riding in these areas are more likely to be seri Shoulder Belts ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under belts normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the using a seat belt properly vehicle or being thrown out 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat adjust the seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front your body These are the strongest parts of your seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a
39. bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches BACK VIEW OF STEERING WHEEL 818fcae7 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push buttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track
40. button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJT bu
41. care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever axie condo De stated HS Way and tay De Canapa Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this proce dure carefully 304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured NOTE Disconnecting the battery with the ignition in the On position will cause vehicles with an automatic transaxle CVT2 to go into default mode and turn on the malfunction indicator light See your authorized dealer to correct this condition 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch Set parking brake place auto matic transaxle in PARK manual transaxle in NEU TRAL and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electr
42. cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the ignition has been turned off The sunroof operation will be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during the 45 second time period ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF EQUIPPED There is a standard 12 Volt power outlet in the instru ment panel and a 115 Volt 150 Watts Maximum power outlet in the center console on certain models for added convenience These outlets can power cell phones elec tronics and other low power devices NOTE Due to overload protection the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a 3 Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Power Outlet 12 Volts 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i
43. collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Pulling Out The Latch Plate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch late into the buckle until you hear a click WARNING l e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you e A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well Ina sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly e A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle in a collision e A shoulder belt
44. door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC if equipped section of this manual for details For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position EEEE EER 80e54ed7 Ignition Key Position 3 Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors 4 Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle Auto Unlock The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 1 The Auto Unlock feature is enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped section of this manual For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto Unlock Feature can be enabled
45. e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the Power Outlet 115 Volts 150 Watt battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 CONSOLE FEATURES WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with the console compart ment lid in the open position Cell phones music players and other hand held electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury The floor console s sliding armrest moves forward 3 inches to accommodate shorter drivers The armrest lid also includes a unique flip pocket for storing a phone or an MP3 player The bin inside the console can hold up to 10 CD jewel cases or other items securely out of sight Floor Console NOTE The flip pocket and console lid features are intended to be used in the upright or open position only while the vehicle is parked While driving all handheld devices should be properly stowed and the flip pocket and the console lid should be closed 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light R
46. ederi uen deep daca Chee ae ES 232 Automatic sepeser raat kiia na 12 227 232 339 AUtOSUECK 2e dE PERSE euin IA RO 236 Manual s sesanan dora d XR eae ROS E UR 12 227 229 Operation uoc v x Pe ea UAR enedes 232 Overdrive xz cease Make ee OS ROC RO a 235 Selection of Lubricant 008 339 Transmission Range Indicator 00 as padne eee 165 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry eee ioe eee e Rie eme du dca 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink9 134 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry sisse s ocean a prae acea 22 Transporting Pets 65 Tread Wear Indicators 0 0000 262 Trip Odometer 0246 ven one chee eer dees 167 Trip Odometer Reset Button 165 Turn Signals ese ERR SEES 117 161 354 UConnect Hands Free Phone 76 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 158 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 378 Universal Transmitter sredit ares 134 HO 398 INDEX MM Unleaded Gasoline 000 0000 275 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 00005 335 Vanity Mirrors 6 eee 76 Variance Compass sire 6 6 06 eee eee eee 178 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading 000 00 naras 253 281 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage ideas io eere Pema dues 350 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Warning Lights Instrument Cl
47. eee ne Y e os 249 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 314 Child Restraint 4cdes aaa RR Rer 57 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 61 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 60 Child Safety Locks omes 30 Child Seats ee a a nd asd eee dine uia d 63 Clean Air Gasoline 0 0 0 0c ee 276 Cleaning Wheels 3 pde bah CE hog trace CR ale ee ad ant 343 Climate Control Ja e OR ae Rn 214 Clock 2212 43 ew RERBA 182 185 193 205 Clutch 30 er TS RE ih a E ADR RS 337 Clutch Fluid 22i ck R3 dined en 337 Coin Holder ssa skepsise o RR e RES 147 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 214 Compact Spare Tire lllllllsleslss 260 COMPASS 2s dieRehS T PX Ier ete cence 180 Compass Calibration 00000 180 Compass Variance 0 a eee 178 Console 4 4 vsc4ce RR cee EERREWUS e RES 147 Contract Service 2e 374 Coolant Antifreeze 02 0005 360 361 Cooling System 6 ee 329 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 331 Coolant Level llle 330 333 Disposal of Used Coolant 0 333 Drain Flush and Refill 0 330 Inspection en INDEX 385 Points to Remember 332 333 Pressure Caps 35cm 95 4006 a S eaa es 332 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 330 Corrosion Protection llle 341 Crankcase Emission Control System 322 Criis Light 206 oe vos Lae IR ea ne Ye
48. fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency es STARTING AND OPERATING 293 Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground CAUTION DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the driv etrain will result NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground Information Provided by DEALER WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 296 Wilf Your Engine Overheats 296 Bl Automatic Transaxle Overheating
49. if the vehicle is stopped manual transmissions or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park or N Neutral position automatic transmissions Press and hold the EVIC but ton when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When DRIVER S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driv er s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until DRIVER S DOOR 1ST or ALL DOORS appears to make your selection es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display un
50. in side the passenger compart ment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler tem peratures while the red area indicates warmer tempera tures 8181dfe1 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Air Conditioning MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculate buttons at the same time REAR RECIRCULATE WINDOW 81791efd DEFROST NOTE See Circulation Control later in this section for proper or extended use of this position Air Conditioning Normal Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning A lamp will illuminate when the Air Con ditioning System is engaged Once the air conditioning is engaged use a combination of the mode control fan speed control and tempera ture control to achieve your desired interior temperature 815fbac8 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Circulation Control Use this button to choose be tween outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle
51. in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is
52. is replaced based on leakage NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be done when ever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning lamp is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual Transaxle the Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to both the Brake System and the Clutch Release System The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The Manual Transaxle Clutch Release System should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the Brake Fluid Reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the H
53. may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 NOTE If this indicator comes on it will brighten to FULL DAYTIME INTENSITY and will not be dimmable CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD 24 OdometerlTrip Odometer A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven Also the cluster will display replacing the odometer trip odometer vehicle warning messages such as door gate ajar and loose gas cap Loos
54. may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of vehicle operation 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is at each end of the instrument panel These nonadjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in either the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures liliis 227 Recommended Shift Speeds 231 Manual Transaxle 0000005 227 Downshifting sees Automatic Transaxle 0 05 227 W Automatic Transaxle If Equipped Normal Starting eresse xe RE 227 Brake Transmission Interlock System 233 Extremely Cold Weather Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock Below 20 F Or 29 C 2 ee ceras 228 SYSTE ice me ahs itl ale ahaa oie eae dor ed 233 If Engine Fails To Start 228 Gear Ranges For Continuously Variable After Starting es caw Shee Run aS 229 piomalic DUROS ENT axcex pseu seta 2e ll Viana Transaxle IE Rauipeed ico 229 E AutoStick If Equipped 236 AutoStick Operation 00 236 224 STARTING
55. on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Information Provided by DEALER INDEX 382 INDEX ae ABS Anti Lock Brake System 244 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 331 Adding Fuel o dede wn soa aet eate 279 Adding Washer Fluid 122 153 Additives Fuel 0 0 0 00 cee eens 277 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 323 Air Conditioner Maintenance 325 Air Conditioning Controls ilu 214 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 220 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 325 326 Air Conditioning System 214 325 Air Pressure Tires lille 257 Alba cieeseece Ie 999g ev wes due Ge RE 46 Airbag Deployment lessen 50 52 Airbag Light 42e se Rz 51 54 67 161 Airbag Maintenance llle 54 Airbag Side 2252 RE rue e ES 52 Airbag Window Si
56. only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof Side Curtain Airbag Location of the vehicle for any reason NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the curtain airbags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side Cur tain Airbags also work with seat belts to improve occu pant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbag
57. or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or of
58. should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing
59. switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Inserta blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the indicator light will turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to t
60. text message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the com
61. the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required STARTING AND OPERATING 245 When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations 246 STARTING AND OPERA
62. the moving belts and fan FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con trol or ESP turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse 306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EME and First gear Usually the least accelerator pedal pres CAUTION sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transaxle overheating and failure It can WARNING also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Do not spin the wheels continu ously for more than 30 seconds Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds TOWING A DISABLED VEHIGEE continuously without stopping when you are stuck With Ignition Key And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Automatic And Manual Transaxle Front wheel drive vehicles must have the front wheels elevated Four wheel drive vehicles must be hauled on a flatbed truck E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 30
63. the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations STARTING AND OPERATING 291 RIGHT STOP TURN A LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN I PINS PARK mies GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector 292 STARTING AND OPERATING RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP Seo od TURN ELECTRIC GROUND BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 for transmission
64. tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle
65. tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 269 The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 kph to receive this information 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will t
66. to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOC
67. to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the brake warning indicator will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident braking capacity in an emergency
68. toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move When finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward ne Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Sliding Feature The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended coverage of the side glass HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See UConnect website for sup ported phones ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following web sites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls betwe
69. tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to 258 STARTING AND OPERATING Se check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are alw
70. 227 Engine Fails to Start 000000 228 Manual Transmission 227 Starting Procedures 000 0000 cae 227 Steering POWE closuk3oede4 x dh ad daleay Eg 246 326 Tilt Column acum RERTIA RS 122 Wheel Lock iuesuuae rede d E S Cs 14 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls cere dose EP ERA E SERA 212 OLOTdge cesars dedu s ue S bu ERE Pe e oe 350 Stuck Freeing inge pee e ERE edes 305 Sut ROOF 64 wee Cede e ee P 141 Sun Visor Extension 0 00 000 eee eee 76 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 46 Synthetic Engine Oil 2 2 ee tats 319 System Navigation 396 INDEX BEEN Tachometer aue ae Bande eee 162 Taillights c eem eek eR EE 354 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 164 297 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 61 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 0 0 0 6 eae 151 Tilt Steering Column 0004 122 Tire and Loading Information Placard 252 Tire Identification Number TIN 251 Tire Markings eos re e a n 247 Tire Safety Information 06 247 TIES ete ge ths Re Rh Ra p as 67 256 378 Aging Life of Tires s siess atakse sasat 262 Alt PreSSUre 436v dpe SAN oed vd bx ea e 256 Alignment 30 336 up ees a AIA Ges s 264 Chains se peterent oe i RR te ed 265 Changing eec t eoe ase ate dis 298 Compact Spare
71. 244 464 444 RE Roa RR 67 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 000000 339 Fluids 246 E REY RARE ee DER ee 361 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 361 Fog Lights m re 116 169 353 Fold Down Speakers direu ieis 152 Folding Rear Seat 0 6 eee 109 Folding Rear Seat Sedan 109 Four Wheel Drive 0 000 cee eens 238 Systems issue ae eae A as we 238 Four Wheel Drive Operation 238 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 04 305 Fuel eects pirti be e At Ba tends 275 361 Adding desee ays eal ere haan RR Rees 279 Additives eau LE DE 277 Capacity aane eed doe ane S Re ed Keo 360 Clean Ai id ah hart canes Ha SE ae ier t ien 276 Filler Cap Gas Cap 0000004 279 j PEE E 323 Gasoline 9 e c e 275 Gauge ieia uenta eden aca tice cane Bare eg 160 FIOSES 25 dh 2G 00 See eG does REUTERS 335 Bru T PTT 161 Octane Ratne cuisses eese x eo esha de 275 Requirements sees 275 System Hoses 0 06 eee eee eee eee 335 Tank Capacity 1 1 6 eee eee 360 Fuel System Caution 0 0000 280 Fueling eos xisc ik Se ne xy eie 279 FUSES sarera ra ub eue be Par eU KESER 347 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 134 Gas Cap Fuel Fillr Cap 279 280 314 Gasoline Clean Air PRENNE OROM 276 HO 388 INDEX NENNEN Gasoline Fuel 02 00 00005 275 360 Gasoline Reformulated sss
72. 4 Sq m 1000 Ibs 453 kg 150 Ibs 68 kg 2 4L Auto Man with Trailer Tow Prep Pack 32 Sq Ft 3 0 Sq m 2000 Ibs 907 kg 225 Ibs 102 kg age AHC Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Note 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information Section in this manual 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents TOW Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on HEIGHT your bumper or trailer hitch 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additio
73. 5 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 256 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure en STARTING AND OPERATING 257 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
74. 7 All Transaxles CAUTION If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY posi tion not in the LOCK position Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing vehicle to flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACCESSORY position Make certain the transaxle remains in NEUTRAL Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the vehicle Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a removable plug in the right side of the shifter housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system The ignition key must be in the on position to use the override lever Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground CAUTION DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the driv etrain will result Information Provided by DEALER MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment Gasoline 312 ll Onboard
75. CS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING e Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP 2WD Operating Modes All 2WD vehicles can choose the following ESP operating modes ESP ON This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situa tions ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or ESP Off for specific reasons as noted below PARTIAL ESP This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP Control Switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS I
76. Center EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing 81826bed Low Tire Pressure Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extin guish once the updated tire pressure s have been re ceived The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 kph to receive this informa tion Check TPM System Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for 3 seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor s is not being received ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 81826bd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM
77. D WASHER DOMELIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWERAIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET A WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM 7i 3 2005 Ot Cy v 4WD BRAKE WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REARFOGLAMP ANDLIFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOURWHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET GONTROL DRIVE BRAKE as m rria X9 mb 3l i ae TOW LJ HAUL VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIRCONDITIONING __ CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON C8 F er 2 i OR CS wy t LOW LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UGONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE Low C E E f bo Ol M MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 8191e970 INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO B INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could res
78. D player Satellite Radio or Vehicle Entertainment System VES if equipped 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time MSG or INFO Button Radio Mode Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only Time Button Press the time button a
79. DE RAQ AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS VES CAPABILITIES NOTE Theradio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 4 RW FF i44 SEEK i 0 va x C EuwE ad Eg 6 DISC MP3 SET 1 2 3 4 5 8 RND DIR S55 5 1 S55 S55 ev 81365bb1 RAO Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the C
80. Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed Iim i5ge gpes cere Rn Anderes Tire Pressure Monitor IPM 175 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 23 ausus Parsi tr Ma deas an cn 175 Bl Radio General Information 181 Radio Broadcast Signals 181 Two Types Of Signals 181 Electrical Disturbances 181 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se AM Reception i xak 9 o RR ERROR RR Roa 181 EM Reception tes uet ae ea 181 H Electronic Digital Clock 005 182 Clock Setting Procedure 182 H Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability 0 183 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 183 Operation Instructions CD Mode 187 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 189 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone f Equipped oes acre bee acne ein eine n 190 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped eec ee sae aed ae ak eu 190 lll Sales Code RAQ AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone And Vehicle Entertainment Systems VES Capabilities x b 2043 cas venient ea deed E 190 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 191 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Audio Play seem e
81. E Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the key fob is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol PN 3 To assemble the transmitter case snap the two halves together a NOTE If the key fob is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug 81182072 Separating Transmitter Halves 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunge
82. E When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks e Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is
83. FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade RND SET Button Radio Mode To SET The Push Button Memory When you a
84. FORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any
85. ING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam age to your vehicle 240 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehi cle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination ie fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami
86. ING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park automatic transmissions or vehicle is in motion manual transmissions Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Door S Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Gate Ajar with a single chime Headlamps On Key In Ignition Check TPM System Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrum
87. ITIE 3 ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to e When prompted say List Phones the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Qu M M E all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to Connect or Disconnect Link Between the the lowest priority To select or delete a paired UConnect System and Cellular Phone phone being announced press the Voice Recogni Your cellular phone can be paired with many different tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the electronic devices but can only be actively connected next two sections for an alternate way to select or with one electronic device at a time delete a paired phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Select another Cellular Phone Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say e Press the Phone button to begin that you want to use it with Setup Phone Pairing e Press the Phone button to begin e At the next prompt say Delete
88. K The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed time keep ing is accurately maintained On the AM FM CD 6 disc radio the time button alter nates the location of the time and frequency on the display On the AM FM CD single disc radio only one of the two time or frequency is displayed Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait approximately 5 seconds es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 SALES CODE REF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC Operating Instructions Radio Mode RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND EEES HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a sec
89. MENTS GASOLINE ENGINES Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel economy when using high quality regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gaso line will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ME symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genate
90. Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Express Mode Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully the stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing the Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial close condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again To ensure sunroof is fully closed press and hold switch until sunroof has completely stopped moving Express Mode Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Next pre
91. NG SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory tr
92. OF YOUR VEHICLE 71 Intermittent Wiper System 122 W Electronic Brake Control System Adding Washer Fluid suus 122 BS CSD ES ERM ESE eaa nd B Tilt Steering Column 00 0 122 ADICEGOR Braseiyoteitte a keen dir d H Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 123 Tiocton Consol a qr MEMO NEN sd 123 PARES E Vasusdi tasas To Set At A Desired Speed 124 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 129 c sopi cote ta door vans cients 124 KAT AEE A SSOSMUBE quet es To Resume Speed 0 0 00 0 000 cece eee ja me Garage Door Opener E Equipped sexes ni To Vary The Speed Setting 124 EO ar HOY a Manual Transaxle 0 0 0 0000 125 Gate CDERIDEUCGRASIAD a sacs 5 To Accelerate For Passing 125 ul 2 E idi Bl Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped 126 Bee TEND d tg OCT BURR a SES DOCUIIEY ou ecce eee VERA ROB De PONS 139 72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Troubleshooting Tips sses scoccata resnas 140 General Information a aoaaa aana aaa 140 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 141 Opening The Sunroof 142 Closing The Sunroof 0 142 Pinch Protect Feature
93. Oil Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Mopar 04884900AB or equivalent ZFR5F 11 Gap 0 043 87 Octane R M 2 Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transaxle CVT Fluid Mopar CVTF 4 Manual Transaxle Fluid Mopar ATF 4 MS9602 Rear Drive Assembly RDA Mopar Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product Power Transfer Unit PTU Mopar Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 or Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 364 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 0 0 365 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed
94. Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL ANCE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RND PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button or turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No P or un Nand Adult Hits Adult_Hits Alert Alert Alert Alert Classical Classical Classic Rock Classic_Rock College College Country Country Emergency Test Emergency Test Foreign Language Foreign_Language Information Information Jazz Jazz News News ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Nostalgia Nostalgia Oldies Oldies Personality Personality Public Public Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues Religious Music Religious_Music station with the
95. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION exem ex m RE UCer NEP ce Ee eile oe e levies 0 Sei Oe eh E T ra E T CE E e 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eese hh tmn 8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee mnt 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 ce eccc cece eee hh tn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 cc cece ccc r cece cece hh hh ih hh e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece cece cece cece een e eee hh hh nnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE eeeeeeeeeeeeehh hh hh hh m hn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2c cece ccc ccc ccc eee hh hh eee mnn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 00 cc ceccccccccccccccceecvcesvcesvces 10 INDEX Op EET Information Provided by DEALER INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E introduction 0 000 000 0040 4 Bl Warnings And Cautions 040 7 Mi Rollover Warning 6 6 eee piping 4 Bi Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl How To Use This Manual 5 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendatio
96. TARTING AND OPERATING 281 VEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Loading Capacities Front Seat Occupants sss ke hn 2 Rear Seat Occupants 0 0002 na 3 L ggage aa cte 9 ew erba 175 Ibs 80 kg Vehicle Rated Capacity 925 Ibs 420 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes the weigh of your vehicle the driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or te
97. TING ME e anda slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise sh
98. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the a
99. Y Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna The luggage rack if equipped should also not be positioned directly above the antenna 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes Driving under wide
100. ability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or ESP Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in this Section of this manual 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tir
101. adios 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phone book entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phone book with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the Phone button and say Phonebook Download Sys tem prompts Ready to accept vcard entry via Blue tooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entr
102. ag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli sion severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 52 THINGS TO KNOW BE
103. age are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter 120 000 200 000 120 Replace Accessory Drive Belt s 120 000 200 000 120 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Information Provided by DEALER IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Bi Reporting Safety Defects 05 375 Vehicle iudex e REESE RU Re XE xS 372 The Cand le E ceeded cose 376 Prepare For The Appointment i lt 2 lt 2244 372 Bl Publication Order Forms 000 376 Pr pare A EISE s ous ee eere eA 372 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Be Reasonable With Requests 372 Quality Grades 1 1 ninae da ia eee 378 H If You Need Assistance 000005 372 Treadwear sees 378 ll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 375 Traction Grades llle l Mopar Parts csi esser e ex ter e 375 Temperature Grades 372 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINI
104. ained ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 373 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 374 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices fo
105. aint Controller ORC Side Remote Acceleration Sensors If Equipped Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win dows If Equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Seatbelt Reminder Light Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC This ORC will detect roll over The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 N seconds as a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airb
106. ame and program type For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre set stations you may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Using the PTY Program Type Button if equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PT
107. an burn CAUTION or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a When servicing the battery always reinstall the bat battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in tery thermowrap The thermowrap provides battery eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water heat protection and will extend overall battery life Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in evaporative loss of the battery fluid Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 CAUTION Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive 4 and negative and identified on the battery ca
108. an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting prob lems and loss of security protection 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION e Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transpon der fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference wit
109. ance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Section 7 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake And Power Steering System Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber Particu lar attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed NOTE Often fluids such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings There fore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not neces sarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose
110. andle 2 Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright EZ position 81781625 Lumbar Adjustment SAN Reclining Seat 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise the head restraint pull up on the head restraint To lower the head restraint depress the button and push down on the head restraint Head Restraint Adjustment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Heated Seats If Equipped ignition you may choose OFF HIGH or LOW heat settings An indicator on the switch shows which setting WARNING has been chosen Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even 81239819 at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or e Pressing the switch once will select high cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat ay level heating Heated Seat Switches This feature heats the front driver s and passengers Pressing the switch a second time will select l
111. arator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radio
112. arding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in this section Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be displayed based on the current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank level Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition
113. arked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open amp close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink b
114. atically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than 3 hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient tempera ture is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE CAUTION e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or sty
115. ational dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing e Even though the system is designed for users speaking number combinations may not be supported in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some e dry weather condition e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down e When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows and dry weather condition operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Power
116. autionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Cellular Phone Names Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone e Press the Phone button to begin The UConnect system allows on going calls to be p 2 transferred from n cellular phone A a UConnect xus Ru ane Ooi Beet tee Setup Phone Pairing system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo n KO
117. ay result in a dangerous electrical system over Natural load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery You may e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Front Header Lamp 00006 T578 Center Dome Lamps senpia raenek sispa T578 Rear Cargo Flashlight 8 A35LF LIGHTS BULBS Outside Bulb No Low Beam High Beam Headlight H13 Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Lights ineeiese met pea Tan us 3157AK or 3157A Front Fog Light i eces eee be cee o n 9145 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSI 45 cie iad nein d Hed ae bd LED Assembly Rear Taly Stoper ssec eo om RR EUR es 3157 Rear Turn Signal 3757AK or 3757A Backup Light 5222s ov ms W16W 921 license Might uu siepe mero E W5W Ott Road Light oe aera the ae aan ahaa H3 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 BULB REPLACEMENT e Raise the hood and locate connector behind the head lamp Headlamp
118. ays cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi WARNING tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires important
119. bdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Resiraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove com partment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers DRIVER AIRBAG PASSENGER AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTER KNEE BOLSTER 81913a96 Front Airbags and Knee Bolsters NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 to a window If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags they are located above the side windows Their WARNING covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open
120. be determined using the procedure shown in Section 7 5 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound 6 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 7 Airbag Warning Light The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8 9 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light does not come on during starting stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 8 Turn Signal Indicator Light The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal when using the turn signal lever 9 High Beam Indicator Light E This light shows that the headlights are on high beam Push the turn signal lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 10 Anti Lock Brake Warning Light If Equipped This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System fes ABS described elsewhere in this manual This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required however the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake s
121. beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the
122. book e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 e After confirmation the phone book entries will be deleted e Note that only the phone book in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phone book entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UCon nect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be ac cessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive
123. c e bas 196 Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play csacesases eee eb Ree e pas 197 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 199 Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play lesser 202 Load Eject Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 202 lll Sales Code REC AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Navigation System 0 0 204 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio i Equipped i Pere LR cs 205 REC Setting The Clock 205 Audio Clock Display llis 207 H Satellite Radio If Equipped 208 System Activation cles 208 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 6 002 209 Selecting Satellite Mode In REF And RAQ Radios 2 5909 be ee oe ESE E 209 Selecting a Channel sess eremia inaa iaia 210 Storing And Selecting Pre Set Channels 210 Using The PTY Program Type Button If Equipped ss sed eee en EE 211 PTY Button Scan v sata lake han 211 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 PTY Button Seek 0 0 0 0 000 00008 211 Satellite Antenna ss ereer ts 211 Reception Quality s ges a enhan ad eai 212 ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 212 Radio Operation CD Player 244 4 spese Pep ER S Ie ll CD DVD Disc Maintenance 214 lll Radio Operation And Cel
124. calities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Light is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start t
125. campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer 376 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Wash ington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge o
126. can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installa tion instructions Rear Seat LATCH Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with
127. ction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an acciden
128. cts Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid types Front Suspension Ball Joints There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are permanently lubricated Inspect these ball joints when ever under vehicle service is done Damaged seals and their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must be replaced Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors liftgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean t
129. d for tailgating and other activities Rear Window Wiper Washer A switch on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch forward to the ON position will activate the wiper The rear wiper operates in an inter mittent mode only Rotating the center of the switch all the way forward will turn on the wash function The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button is pressed Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position Fold Down Speakers ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Rear Washer Wiper Control If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer If Equipped is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol vent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Rear Window Defroster The push button is located on the bottom right sid
130. d vehicles refer to Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st under Personal Settings in the EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the keyfob en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Persona
131. d here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
132. d then know your options at any prompt say Help following Phone Pairing the following compound command the beep The UConnect system will play all the can be said Setup Phone Pairing options at any prompt if you ask for help e For each feature explanation in this section only the To activate the UConnect system from idle simply combined form of the voice command is given You press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for can also break the commands into parts and say each directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a part of the command when you are asked for it For press of the Phone button on the radio control head example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer
133. de Curtain 46 52 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 164 Alignment and Balance 00056 264 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio 211 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 330 360 361 Capacities deduc tis ants ware ieee ingen 360 Disposal suspe ct Gia Balsa heme RUE tare aes 333 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 126 244 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Appearance Carey cca wh ke aes 6A Pen 341 Automatic Door Locks 0 0005 27 28 Automatic Transaxle 12 227 232 298 339 Fluid Level Check 0 0 0 0 0 00 0c eae 339 Interlock System 542i sdb RR eer 233 Overheating ix x XE SR ae 298 Selection Of Lubricant 004 339 Shibt ng se sites udin cedes reign as Ro EO 234 Special Additives 244448 etes 339 Autostick ees asse eso oh ati aces Sh E ek ER d 236 en INDEX 383 Ball Joints cin aad oan hae wa Maas wea ae 327 Battery usce ace dae mot bw edocet es 324 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Belts Drive 2 5 44444486044 RE ba ed Od GEES 320 Body Mechanism Lubrication 327 B Pillar Location sanpa irge Ree Y 252 Brake Assist System 000 0000 cee 128 Brake Control System Electronic 127 Brake Fluid 22s 54444 64530890 005 362 Brake Parking ceccar gia dain ea aa eae ee 241 Brake System xmi ngina Send EE ERE 243 335 Anti Lock ABS
134. e chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has returned to a stop Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is set To set the parking brake pull up firmly on the lever Also place the gear selector in the Park position automatic transaxle or Reverse manual transaxle To release the parking brake apply the brake pedal pull up slightly on the lever then depress the button on the end of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the floor 242 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE The parking brake lever will not release unless the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position Parking Brake Lever When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in Park otherwise the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of Park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill grade You should always apply the parking brake before leav ing the vehicle WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure
135. e gas cap will be displayed from the Odometer Trip Odometer on all models NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instru ment cluster all warnings including door and gATE will only be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter If Equipped in Section 3 U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined Change Oil Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster T
136. e lamp from the liftgate Prying Lamp from Liftgate ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise 3 Pull bulb from socket 8180e722 Removing Socket from Lamp Removing Bulb From Socket 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Center High Mounted Stoplight Light is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement Off Road Light 1 Remove the three screws attaching the lens to the housing 81c68d11 Lens Removal MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 2 Unlatch the wire clasp securing the bulb into the 3 Disconnect the bulb from the lamp harness to replace housing and rotate it into the position shown the bulb Releasing the bulb Disconnecting bulb 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES US Metric Fuel Approximate 13 5 Gallons 51 0 Liters Engine Oil With Filter All Gasoline Engines Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine 4 5 Quarts 4 26 Liters Oil Cooling System Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Miles Formula or 7 2 Quarts 6 8 Liters equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine
137. e may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all STSdeREE passengers are properly secured too Power Sunroof Switch Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening the Sunroof
138. e of the blower control knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster An amber light shows that the defroster is on x 819179d2 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten minutes For five more minutes of operation press the switch again To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating Rear Wiper Heater Grid cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED An optional dealer installed roof rack with cross rails is available through MOPAR for added cargo versatility UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Wi Instrument Panel Features 00 158 Mi Instrument Cluster Premium 159 Bl Instrument Cluster Descriptions 160 Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It Equippedis ue path Gua reos tiere Reg ders 171 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 172 EVIC Functions l l 173 Compass Temperature Audio 174 Average Fuel Economy 174
139. e resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM ABS TCS BAS ERM ESP Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Miti gation ERM and Electronic Stability Program ESP All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in this Section of the manual for more information about ABS Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and st
140. e retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee LATCH compatible you
141. e the switchable retractor please refer to Automatic Locking Retractor ALR in this section e n the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from th
142. e too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voicemail systems have system timeout settings too short that may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button ca
143. eae ena ba 265 li Tire Rotation Recommendations 265 Wi Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It Equipped sasainn sere RR ehia 266 Base System If Equipped 269 Premium System If Equipped 271 General Information 0 274 Snow MEL MEC 275 Bl Fuel Requirements 00000 0000s 275 Gasoline Engines 0 24 5 peperere rinite 275 Reformulated Gasoline 276 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 276 MMT In Gasoline vci oc y RT 277 Materials Added To Fuel ius 277 Fuel System Cautions lille 277 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 278 W Adding Fuel 1 2 2222 o RI Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 280 B Vehicle Loading 2 Re 281 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 281 la Trailer Towing seen 281 Common Towing Definitions 281 Trailer Hitch Classification 284 226 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings sese RR 285 Trailer And Tongue Weight 286 Towing Requirements lesse 287 292 Towing Tips ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground 293
144. eature is selected the headlamps will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the U Connect system are confirmed Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Display English or Metric The EVIC odometer and navigation system units can be changed between English and Metric Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until US or METRIC appears to make your selection Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings In order to ensure compass accuracy the com pass variance should be set to the zone number on the compass variance map that corresponds to the current location of the vehicle NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the Instrument Panel This is where the compass sensor is located COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8000cbab UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 To Set the Variance with the ignition in the ON position with a short button press le
145. ed ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT en STARTING AND OPERATING 249 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Se EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol
146. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 227 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transaxle Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the gear selector in N Neutral NOTE The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor NOTE If key won t turn and steering wheel is locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Automatic Transaxle The gear selector must be in the P Park or N Neutral position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of P Park Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to 228 STARTING AND OPERATING Se start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to t
147. emovable Self Recharging Flashlight If Equipped The dual function light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area and part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries when snapped back into place for convenience To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high twice for low and a third time to return to off Press and Release es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 81814475 Removing Flashlight Three Press Switch 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Cargo Cover If Equipped Removable Load Floor The cargo area trim panels include two notches for The cargo area load floor is removable and can be mounting the available cargo cover that accommodates washed with mild soap and water the reclining rear seat WARNING In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle Sa Rear Cargo Area es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Cargo Tie Down Loops There are four D rings tie down loops in the lower trim for securing cargo The tie downs loca
148. ems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if equipped side airbags for both the driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should Ws SE be
149. en the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phone book enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy amp for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons Phone Button and Voice Recognition Button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio e The individual buttons are de
150. ence your cellular phone owner s manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone a
151. ent cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure EVIC Functions EVIC Button Press the EVIC button until one of the following func tions are displayed on the EVIC e Compass Temperature Audio e Average Fuel Economy 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Distance To Empty DTE e Elapsed Time e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM e Personal Settings To Reset The Display Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the EVIC button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will be dis played during this 3 second window Compass Temperature Audio Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station For additional information reg
152. ers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Windshield Wiper Operation Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed 81918d49 Wiper Control 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the knob upward clockwise to decrease the delay time and downward counterclockwise to increase the delay time The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer If Equipped is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol vent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the steering column push down on the lever below the turn signal control lever With one hand firmly on the wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place Tilting Steering Column Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153. es 165 Cup Holder erar cscs suse eee n Rn 147 Customer Assistance 0 00 eee eee 372 Data Recorder Event 0 0000 55 Dealer Service 2 0 0 ee 316 Defroster Rear Window ss 153 Defroster Windshield 67 216 217 Delay Intermittent Wipers 122 Diagnostic System Onboard 313 Dimmer Switch Headlight 117 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 333 Engine Oil sse Ever baie ee ares 320 Door LOCKS a ac ace Roe OS ao T 26 Door Locks Automatic eee nee 27 Door Opener Garage ss risse inani aariaa 134 Downshifting sssistiesrsnisebetsg mere aed 231 Drive Belts pera 0 0 ccc ee eee 320 Driver s Seat Back Tilt 0005 105 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 000000 238 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water xu aue Gaye WS OR E Bae See Y EA ee 239 Electric Remote Mirrors 000000 74 Electrical Power Outlets lille 144 Electronic Brake Control System 127 Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Electronic Roll Mitigation Electronic Stability Program Traction Control System 386 INDEX BEEN Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Program ESP 130 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 171 Emergency In Case of Jac kine 2 02 seine abuse teens ingaans es 298 Jump Starting 0 ense
154. es or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM can not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striki
155. ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure the are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of degradation that could cause failure Fuel System Connections Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are designed with tubes and special connects connections and clamps which have unique material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio rated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufactures specified tubes connections and clamps or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing Brake System In order to assure brake system perform
156. f during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Climate Controls The Climate Control System allows you to balance the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 1a3ffa3 Climate Control Location The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains R 134a a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere The controls are as follows Fan Control OFF HIGH 81791102 Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Mode Control Air Direction The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular avem Mode the more air distribu tion you receive from that mode Panel 74 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This
157. f the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 377 e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Call Toll Free at Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations e 1 800 890 4038 U S these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer acc enaadl controlled vehicle systems and features They show Or exactly how to find and correct problems the first time i using step by step troubleshooting and driveability VASTE DONE PME Wort Wile YNE ae procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com a a e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals e Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips 378 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Req
158. feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side x window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control air flow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen gers the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward the left rear passenger UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air
159. g child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be switched to an automatic locking mode which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a switchable retractor it will have a distinctive label To operat
160. ged period Crankcase Emission Control System Proper operation of this system depends on freedom from sticking or plugging due to deposits As vehicle mileage builds up the PCV valve and passages may accumulate deposits If a valve is not working properly replace it with a new valve DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or plugging deposits Replace if necessary ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the WARNING speed at which a vehicle can be driven Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent filter replacement may be necessary The fuel filters are located inside the fuel tank See your dealer for service The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with Air Cleaner Element Filter the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in Replace the filter at the intervals shown in the Mainte serious personal injury nance Schedule Refer to Section 8 of this manual 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Maintenance Free Battery 1 You will never have to add water nor is periodic main WARNING tenance required Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and c
161. h this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming If you have two valid sentry keys you can program new sentry keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition
162. h toll by 10 000 or more Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers each year and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 and Excessive Spend million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person Always Buckle Up is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up See Owner s Manual For Further Information HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section 80bfe0t0 contains the information you desire Rollover Warning Label The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual 6 INTRODUCTION SV m l gt y ESP an gt 4 ej BAS t ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATERIN FUEL REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULA HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE g 3 d 9 l A O 1 cz T BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTERLIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPERANDLOWER HEATEDSEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE S CIO y scan Z lt AWD 1 d Cv T FUELFILLSIDE REARWINDOW WINDSHIEL
163. has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading 818168a4 Engine Oil Dipstick 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine as indicated by the range markings as described above on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for recommended engine oil change intervals Engine Oil Selection Gasoline Engines For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 American Petroleum Institute API Engine O
164. he OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans axle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly so follow the procedure carefully See section 6 of this manual for jump starting instructions Extremely Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the NORMAL STARTING procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the NORMAL STARTING procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 229 WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in fla
165. he radio display If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player e This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SCAN Button CD Mode Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and 4 move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last selected mode If you do not remove the disc withi
166. he engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operatio
167. he following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The system monitors the doors hood liftgate and igni tion switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will signal with the horn for 30 seconds and the lights for 60 seconds If the triggering device is not deactivated the horn will sound again after a 5 second delay for another 30 seconds If the trigger remains present this cycle will repeat for up to 5 minutes To Set the Alarm 1 Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door lock switch or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all doors 3 The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for 16 seconds This shows that the system is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the system will automatically disarm After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash slowly This shows that the system is fully armed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Disarm the System 1 Press UNLOCK on the Keyless Entry Transmitter 2 Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry key will disarm the system A valid key is one that
168. he hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rear view mirror Each light is turned ON by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the light OFF The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 81790d82 Map Reading Lights 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically Multi Function Control Lever The Multi Function Control Lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and fog lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights Turn the end of the Multi Function Control Lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight operation Headlight Control To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the Multi Function Control Lever up or down es
169. he lubricant has become contaminated with water If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained be tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 inch 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule located in Section 8 of this manual for the correct change interval ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD AWD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained be tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 inch 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule located in Section 8 of this manual for the correct change interval
170. he nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft Ibs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated immediately flat tire repaired or replaced 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct pressure as required ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW BATTERY WARNING WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans Take
171. heir seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler Corporation does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning Sys tem BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4
172. hicle in Section 6 of this manual for additional information The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects WARNING vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire Fast ep ining Hes qan be dangerous forces ganer ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited t
173. ian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Butto
174. iary lights to be covered Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 The auxiliary Off Road lights can be turned on by WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS pressing the top of the switch when Off Road conditions sx The wipers and washers are operated by a switch require additional lighting To turn off the auxiliary lights on the control lever The lever is located on the press the bottom of the switch right side of the steering column Windshield Washers 3 To use the washer pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected Off Road Light Switch 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If thelever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers Mist Feature will operate for two wipe cycles then turn OFF Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate 81918d41 Rear Washer control 81918d45 Mist Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wip
175. ical loads 4 Remove the air intake duct covering the battery using the two finger screws on the cover 5 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis charged battery ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305 WARNING Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts 6 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact 7 If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi lizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3 seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position 8 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 9 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se quence exactly Be careful of
176. ie 317 Disposal 2x suscrito ex ner RR CRUS 320 IT ceeds ERROR RON 320 HO 392 INDEX ME Identification Logo snang aaas 319 Materials Added to 0 00000 cea 319 Recommendation sss 318 360 Syntheti sceneeeceqesbe I S CREER RUE 319 VISCOSIM cuerskibesgcc eres crebrae 319 Oil Pressure Light 222sslis o RR Rees 161 Onboard Diagnostic System iis 313 314 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 134 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Outside Air Intake 0 0 00 eee 221 OverdriV x2e 3me PE ee ee heehee x8 235 Overheating Engine llle 296 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 376 Paint Cafe csse xXx ue wc CE PUE E C 341 Panic Alarni ag Fava edat i dE de Ae de d 21 Parking Brake lt c ecce 44945288 sb iiei Les 241 Passing Light se ae RS Melee ak ae RR 118 Personal Settings cse he ae ree cea rape E x 175 l NCC ELM 65 Phone Cell lat 5 32252 Re ER eI S 76 Phone Hands Free UConnect 76 Placard Tire and Loading Information 252 Power Distribution Center Fuses 347 Door Locks 222022 RS Rn 27 MiffO S 4 clem gris xU RR RES Res 74 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 144 Steeritig cuve oe bes ue ERR RE a 246 326 Steering Checking 26 lesse ee 326 SUNDO ius sal ute lene dee Rx eec 141 Transfer Unit 2 42222 uo n 341 W ndOWS eta pedd ace Re 3S ane dT E ae EROR 31 Power Steeri
177. ies tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 375 WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy
178. ies from your phone using the Bluetooth Object ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX trans fers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will be use only the first 24 characters Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phone book is recom mended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phone book entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phone book entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book
179. il Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low tempera ture starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil vis cosity grade for your engine Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives 7 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Disposing of Used Engine Oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from your vehicle Used oil indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engi
180. ild or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 80e54ed7 Ignition Key Positions NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the lever in PARK the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always right slightly then remove the key as described If a remove key from the ignition and lock all doors malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the when leaving the vehicle unattended ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Locking Doors With The Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward to unlock the door turn the key forward See Section 7 of this manual for door lock lubrication Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition both the power door locks and Remote Keyless Entry RKE will not function STEERING WHEEL LOCK MANUAL TRANSMISSION ONLY Your manual transmission vehicle is equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved no m
181. iling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days the automatic transaxle oil may become too hot e If this happens the transmission overheat in dicator light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299 Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floo
182. ime a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 SEEK Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the
183. imize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Automatic ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT and or the engine from overspeed and changes down will only happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stalling Autostick Shifter NOTE Autostick is not functional until the CVT warms up in cold weather ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237 Autostick operation is activated in the D position by Autostick General Information moving the shift lever side to side Moving the lever to the side will activate Autostick and shift up to the next higher manual ratio unless you are already operat ing in or near overdrive in which case 6th ratio will be selected In like manner moving the lever to will e Ifa low range is selected and the engine accelerates to activate Autostick and shift to the next lower manual the rev limit the transaxle will automatically select the ratio After Autostick is activated the manual ratio next higher ratio selected is displayed in the transmission ratio display and tipping the lever to the or direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio e If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is brough
184. in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will be displayed Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits have been displayed The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits are displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With RAQ Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will be displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User s Manual Selecting Satellite Mode in REF and RAQ Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display ACD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Selecting Satellite Mode RAQ Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display These radios will also display the current station n
185. inal tires with tires of a different size specified for your vehicle Some combinations of un approved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You Alignment And Balance could lose control and have an accident resulting in Poor suspension alignment may result in may result in false speedometer and odometer readings serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided other than what was originally equipped on your wear vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose e Vehicle pull to right or left control and have an accident e Fast tire wear Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right equate speed capability can result in sudden tire fail Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer ure and loss of vehicle control for proper diagnosis ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
186. ing the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which lij minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Su
187. ing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 CAUTION Mixing of coolants other than specified Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT coolant is intro duced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi tive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant a minimum solution of 50
188. is entered by depressing and holding the ESP Control Switch for 5 seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After 5 seconds the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP Off message will appear in the odometer Press and release the trip odometer button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 In this mode ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph 56 km h At 35 mph 56 km h the normal ESP stability function returns with the exception of engine power reduction TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 35 mph 56 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESP is off To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP Control Switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
189. is programmed to that particular vehicle A valid key will disarm the system an invalid key will allow the engine to run for 2 seconds and stop Security System Manual Override The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a maximum of 66 feet 20 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system LOCK UNLOCK 8132a7a6 Three Button Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors and liftgate When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section of this manual for details NOTE The system can also be programmed to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equippe
190. ission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor This requirement may limit the ability to always mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires percentage of total trailer weight with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact ing sequi spare tire Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This co
191. ition to the ON position Do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob 6 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds 7 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode All fobs that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard 8 Using the fob to be programmed press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons simultaneously 9 A single chime will be heard 10 Within four seconds of hearing the chime press and release the UNLOCK button on the fob 11 A single chime will be heard 12 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional fobs 13 Turn the ignition to the OFF position 14 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed fobs function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOT
192. l Exhaust Gas es teed eine pe ae cata ed 66 Restraint System SRS Airbag 46 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Event Data Recorder EDR 55 Vehicle gosace acid pod oat ale RO RC CRAS alt Babs Child Restraints ssa ste been pages E 57 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make ll Engine Break In Recommendations 65 Ctl The NORIS d 80 easter wane ba oe d a Safiy Tips rae orien us aitk epi x d Io ed 66 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 81182d3d Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Manual Transaxle Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key Automatic Transaxle If Equipped Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A ch
193. l Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC sec tion of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 4 seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock and Flash Lamps With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this proce dure Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings in the EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While
194. l comfort pull the strap forward just enough to release the seatback latch Then push the seatback to a reclined position approximately 35 degrees maximum and release the strap WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released First pull the hood release lever located on the left kick panel Secondary Hood Latch Lift the hood prop rod clipped to the right side left side facing hood of the engine compartment to secure the Primary Hood Latch hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the Then move the safety catch located under the front edge location stamped into the inner hood surface of the hood near the center and raise the hood ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 20 cm 8 inches and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If t
195. l then go out NOTE Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in the Electronic Brake Control System section of this manual for additional information DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels es STARTING AND OPERATING 239 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden m stop DRIV
196. le Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System If Equipped I X This is the Tire Pressure Monitoring System warn ing indicator located in the instrument cluster The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor
197. limb hills without speed loss WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using Speed Control On Hills NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS IF EQUIPPED This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking NOTE ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers WARNING e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including thos
198. lling the speed control lever towards you CANCEL or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases Manual Transaxle Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to be shifted into a lower gear to c
199. lular Phones 214 Bl Climate Controls 0 000000 ee ee 214 Climate Controls 0 0 000005 214 Ait Conditioning saccis aes egre ses 218 Air Filtration System If Equipped 219 Operating Tips soe eA RR es 220 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 81a575ae 1 Air Outlet 5 Glove Box 9 Hazard Warning Flasher 2 Demisters 6 Storage Bin 10 ESP OFF Switch If Equipped 3 Instrument Cluster 7 Climate Controls 4 Radio 8 Heated Seat Switches If Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM AWI pl NSE SET 4Wb bs 8 D BERRA Amel je S 5 6 amp 7 26 gu 818da26c 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel GaugelFuel Door Location When the ignition switch is in the ON position EU the pointer will show the level of fuel remain ing in the fuel tank The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located 2 Voltage Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the Charging System light remains on or comes on while driving it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging sy
200. ly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle E STARTING AND OPERATING 231 Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in table Units in mph km h Manual Transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds Engine BE Size eration 1 to2 2to3 3to4 4to5 Rate All En Accel 14 23 23 37 29 47 45 72 gines Cruise 12 19 18 29 25 40 32 52 Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life CAUTION If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high a vehicle speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch E To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to 2nd or 1st gear when descending a steep grade When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur dened 232 STARTING AND OPERATING ME AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED e Shift into P Park only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of R Reverse only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed e Do not shift from R Reverse P Park or N Neutral into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE Y
201. menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina tions and routes AM FM stereo radio and six disc CD changer with MP3 capability Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a DVD that is loaded into the unit One map DVD covers all of North America Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions REC Setting the Clock GPS Clock The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set 1 At the Main Menu screen highlight Clock Setup and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the TIME button on the unit s faceplate The Clock Setup screen appears Clock Setu GPS Clock FM 92 5 On CHRYSLER DR E 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Clock Setup 2 To show the GPS clock select Displayed Clock GPS Clock and press ENTER 3 To adjust the time zone Select Time Zone and press ENTER Select the appropriate time zone and press ENTER 4 To turn daylight savings on or off select Daylight Savings and press ENTER Select On or Off and pres
202. move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed WARNING If you are required to drive with the deck lid liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the LED is not lit during starting have it checked If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield Periodic Safety
203. mporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 68 kg 150 Ibs allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 1096 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle en STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fri
204. n To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with PRO GRAMMING HOMELINK Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This devic
205. n 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner RND SET Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3 5 mm stereo audio cable
206. n airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facin
207. n along the arm Gently place the wiper arm on the windshield 3 Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip until it locks in place Windshield Washer Reservoir The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the engine compartment on the right side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged Cooling System have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam WARNING aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep When working near the radiator cooling fan dis into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature change or lubrication Replace as required controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide
208. n be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take prec
209. n damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 FUSES INTEGRATED POWER MODULE IPM Cavity Cartridge Mini Description An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine Fuse Fuse compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center 6 10Amp IOD Sw Pwr Mir contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that Red Ocm Steering Cntrl identifies each component may be printed on the inside Sdar Hands Free of the cover Refer to Engine Compartment in this Phone section of the owner s manual for the underhood location 7 30 Amp IOD Sensel of the Integrated Power Module IPM Green Cavity Cartridge Mini Description janie TOL aenga a Bs 9 40 Amp Power Seats 1 Empty Empty Greeti 2 15 Amp AWD 4WD ECU Lt Blue Feed 10 n CCN Power Locks 3 10 Amp CHMSL Brake Switch Red Feed 11 E d Power Outlet 4 10 Amp Ignition Switch Feed 12 20 Amp Ign Run Acc Inverter Red Yellow 5 ae Trailer Tow 13 20 Amp Pwr run Acc Outlet casa Yellow RR 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fu
210. n step 3 ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make 3 There are two front jacking locations and two rear jacking locations on each side of the body The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts the rear ones by two rectangular cutouts For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten t
211. nal factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transm
212. ncy situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may b
213. nd the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M
214. ndicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally with the exception of engine power reduction This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP Control Switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation WARNING In the Partial ESP mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP Control Switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP 4WD Operating Modes In addition to ESP ON and Partial ESP described above in ESP 2WD Operating Modes all 4WD equipped vehicles can also choose the following ESP operating mode ESP OFF This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode
215. ndows will operate only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position ACC position and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or the driver s door is opened Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under the Understanding your Instrument Panel section Auto Down The driver s window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window lock button To enable the window controls press the window control button again Lock Out Switch LIFTGATE NOTE The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and turn to the right manual lock models only The liftgate can also be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors The central locking unlocking feature if equipped can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or clo
216. ne oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturers engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Drive Belt Check Condition Check the drive belt condition Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual Inspect the drive belt for evidence of cuts cracks or glazing and replace belt if any sign of damage which could result in belt failure The belt is self tensioning and will not need adjustment Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for spark plug information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to ass
217. ng Fluid 004 362 Power Transfer Unit l l 341 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 46 Preparation for Jacking 00 299 en INDEX 393 Pretensioners Seat Bells se dle bate dou Rp ean MUR es aw 43 Programmable Electronic Features 175 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless ENY e cti wm a o Re Re o e Ra ae aes 22 Radial Ply Tires 0 0 riasa entres 259 Radio Broadcast Signals 04 181 Radio Navigation 000000 204 Radio Operation 0 183 190 214 Radio Satellite 0 0 000000 205 208 Radio Sound Systems 183 190 Rear Axle Differential llle 340 Rear Drive Assembly 0005 340 Rear Liftgate Sedan ese os aod cane Peace a ee 32 R ar Seat Folding sede edere s 109 Rear Window Defroster less 153 Rear Window Features 0 00000 eee 152 Rear Wiper Washer eee 152 Recorder Event Data 0 0 0 0 cee eee 55 Recreational Towing 0 00000 e ee 293 Remiserant iw ak Saal e pr ei Rond 326 Reminder Seat Belt llle 44 Remote Control Door Locks 22 20 m mee Ree 19 Security Alarm lee eee 18 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 212 Replacement Bulbs 000005 350 Replacement Keys 0 00000 ce eee eee 16 Replacement Parts s
218. ng objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP T
219. nol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emerge
220. not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle es STARTING AND OPERATING 279 CAUTION e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle tion Indicator Light to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled e Never add fuel when the engine is
221. ns in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it
222. ns in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can be caused to go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may rollover when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully INTRODUCTION 5 Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S i government notes that the universal use of existing seat A WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK belts could cut the highway deat
223. nsion tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 24 000 40 000 24 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 24 000 40 000 24 368 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first M A N T N Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months n Replace the spark plugs 2 0L 2 4L Engines 30 000 50 000 30 ME Change the manual transmission fluid if using your M vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow S plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service 48 000 80 000 48 ha commercial service off road desert operation or Il more then 50 of your driving is at sustained high 3 speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C i Change Rear Drive Assembly RDA fluid 60 000 100 000 60 L Change Power Transfer Unit PTU fluid 60 000 100 000 60 E Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter if 8 using your vehicle for any of the following police 60 000 100 000 60 taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary 90 000 150 000 90 Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 170 000 60 Replace the timing belt 2 4L engines 102 000 170 000 102 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 369 Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mile
224. nts and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turers recommended fluid will cause belt slip and result in a complete transmission failure Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked only by a trained technician Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the correct change interval Special Additives Do not add any materials other than leak detection dyes to Continuously Variable Transaxle CVT Fluid CVTF 4 CVTF 4 is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Manual Transaxle Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more that 3 16 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the following conditions exist e T
225. nts the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in P Park It also prevents shifting out of P Park unless the key is in the ACC or ON positions and the brake pedal is depressed NOTE Ifa malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service 234 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Automate Transaxle CVT Automatic Transaxle CVT WARNING DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P Park or N Neutral positions into another gear range Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles P Park you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis running Before exiting a vehicle you should always sion The engine can be started in this range Never use P shift the vehicle into P Park remove the key from Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always key is removed from the ignition the transmission apply the parking brake first and then place the selector shift lever is locked in the P Park position securing in P Park position the vehicle against unwanted movement Further more you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle
226. o e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING CAUTION e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that Replacing orig
227. o remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a If year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 1 Lift the wiper arm away from the glass 2 Push the release tab and slide the wiper blade assem bly dow
228. o reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 25 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system a called OBD that monitors emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condi tion checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs NOTE If this indicator comes on it will brigh
229. oi nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is Although your vehicle is capable of driving through not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty shallow standing water consider the following before Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to doing so lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to 8 P g the engine Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty en STARTING AND OPERATING 241 WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the BRAKE ignition on the Brake Light in the instrument cluster will come on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is on It does not show the degree of brake application If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving a chime will sound to alert the driver Th
230. omers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associ ated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permis sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction ie pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be dis closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of DaimlerChrysler product litigation involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law
231. on to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning ON OFF the ignition will cancel the MUTE feature NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will display for 5 seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW
232. ond time to turn OFF the radio mm Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it SEEK p gt 44 RW FF 0 wx 5 Tae a Eeg 1 2 3 4 5 6 RND AUX ic 2 c c 3 c 2 lc c 2 SET When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition REF Radio is ON 815eb156 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE butt
233. or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position D 80e54ed7 Ignition Key Position 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock features in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors If Equipped Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the lock or unlock position Inserting Ignition Key WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged Child Protection Door Lock Location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED Power Window Switches Power Window Switch Location The control on the left front door has up down switches that give you finger tip control of all four power win dows There is a single opening and closing switch on the passenger doors for passenger window control The wi
234. ore than 1 2 turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition switch the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel With the engine running turn the steering wheel upside down turn off the engine and remove the key Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine If the key is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered
235. orge ssip e nians d rea cee 316 Replacement Tires 22222 x e mes 263 Reporting Safety Defects 040 375 Restraints Child reses 9 43 aw ea 3e e 57 63 Restraints Infant 0 00 00 eee ee ee 57 Restraints Occupant sescestis pts 34 Retractable Cargo Area Cover ls 150 Roll Over Warning 394 INDEX aa Roof Rack Luggage Rack 0 154 Rotation Tires mersedes atea Esra 265 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 66 Safety Checks Outside Vehide 67 Safety Defects Reporting 04 375 Safety Information Tire 247 Salety IPS dece o bdo as e RH gens eas 66 Satellite Radio llle 205 208 Satellite Radio Antenna 05 211 Schedule Maintenance 0000005 365 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 00000 00 0s 346 Seat Belt Reminder sess 44 Seat Belts 2 0 eee 34 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 39 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 39 And Pregnant Women 0044 46 Child Restraint 0 0 0 0 00 0 ee eee 57 Extender uu e a sete eae BS Goodie RC t es 45 Front Seat 22a ace o a ad wea eae ee eS 35 Pretensioners 000 llle 43 Rear Seat xisa 4 Had 40 ipusa Ro Eb iP SEES 35 Reminder 0 00000 eee ee eas 162 Seats anc cia yew valve Rade SEK A GGA PER 103 Adjustment 0 0 0 0 00 0000 0000008 103 Cleaning isis to
236. ot remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOT
237. ou MUST press and hold the brake pedal down Automatic Shift Lever while shifting out of P Park CAUTION Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following precautions are not observed es STARTING AND OPERATING 233 WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of P Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC positions Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of P Park NOTE If a malfunction occurs the transaxle will not shift out of park Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a remov able plug in the right side of the shifter housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system The key must be in the ignition and in the on position to use the override lever If this occurs obtain service as soon as possible Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system preve
238. ould be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur STARTING AND OPERATING 247 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD En en AU M KS MTM SIZE d A d MAXIMUM DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY AND STANDARDS 3 TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H 248 STARTING AND OPERATING ME European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall prec
239. ow level seats The controls for the heater is located on the heating Pressing the switch a third time will shut the instrument panel below the radio After turning on the heating elements off 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When high temperature heating is selected the heaters Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal high temperature level If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to the low level after about 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illu minated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after about 30 minutes NOTE If the high heat setting is selected heat will be felt within 2 to 3 minutes Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area each rear seatback can be folded forward Pull the strap forward to move the seat forward and flat Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat Folding Rear Seat 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped Rear Seat Folded Flat us Rear Seat Recline Pull ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Reclining The Rear Seat For additiona
240. pact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 2 2 0 000 000 000 KR55120123 Canada 20024 sois oes e e 9 2671 S120123 SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h STARTING AND OPERATING 275 FUEL REQUIRE
241. placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up WARNING on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your z abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Positioning Lap Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to ret
242. pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will autom
243. r The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the cargo area in the cargo area Spare Tire Removal Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK automatic transaxle or REVERSE manual transaxle Turn OFF the ignition WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the Spare Tire and Jack Stowage i vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel BLOCKA e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 818fccb7 Jacking Locations CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated i
244. r Unit PTU AWD AWD Models Only Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion lll Fuses Integrated Power Module IPM li Vehicle Storage ll Replacement Bulbs ll Bulb Replacement Headlamps Fog Lights Tail Lights Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights Replacement License Lights Center High Mounted Stoplight es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 Off Road Light es RR 358 Ioan PM 361 H Fluids And Capacities i2 rre ens 360 CHASSIS coda ua x once eS FRA EN dea 362 Bi Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 361 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT GASOLINE WINDSHIELD POWER STEERING ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID FUSES INTEGRATED WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR FILL RESERVOIR POWER MODULE COOLANT ENGINE OIL RADIATOR AIR CLEANER BATTERY BOTTLE DIPSTICK CAP FILTER 818fccof ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems When these systems are oper ating properly your vehicle will provide excellent per formance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Ligh
245. r the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilit
246. r to lock the doors from For personal security and safety in the event of an inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the as when you park and leave the vehicle keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door WARNING When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju ries and death Manual Door Lock Plunger ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Power Door Locks A door lock switch is located on the driver door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switches Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Auto Lock feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power
247. ra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the vi 8160180a es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Window Fogging Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather To clear the windows set mode to the mix or defrost position Direct the panel outlets toward the side windows Do not use recirculate without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by using the defrost position If the fogging problem persists clean the inside window surfaces The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect ing on the inside surface of the glass NOTE In cold weather the use of the recircu late position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging press the recirculation button until recirculate is off Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Outside Air Intake When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake directly in front of the wind shield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake plenum
248. ract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push anchorage button to release the anchor age and move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjustable Anchorage 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions The second row center lap shoulder belt features a three point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle which allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded The mini buckle and shoulder belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel for added convenience 1 Remove the mini latch and regular latch from its stowed position in the right rear
249. rates off of your vehi cle s battery NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener models Programming HomeLink manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Your vehicle should be p
250. re The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants And Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 9 kg 20 lbs but are less than one year old 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag A
251. re receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Operation Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on t
252. rec ommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent in water should be used Use higher Ij concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scald ing or injury do n
253. reen quickly press the TIME button on the navigation faceplate 2 In this example the large clock appears on the screen mm 1123456 819a09a5 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 To switch the clock to the small clock quickly press TIME again 14123456 819a09ac 4 To toggle back to the large clock simply press TIME SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers over 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following informa tion available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REF Radios With the ignition switch
254. required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 366 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se At Each Stop for Fuel e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully operation warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil levelwhile At Each Oil Change the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below
255. running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed a GASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odom eter in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system en S
256. s Releasing Red Lock Tab Locating Headlamp Connector ai EE 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE e Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out at connector S Twisting Bulb From Socket SEES SEES 2 ae SEES 81911559 e Twist the bulb to the left and pull outward from Remove green connector from back of bulb by pulling assembly traight back SEER m NOTE These are halogen bulbs Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb life ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 Fog Lights 81911575 Removing Halogen Bulb From Assembly Fog Light and Connector 1 Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout 2 Rotate bulb and connector 1 4 turn counterclockwise 3 Pull bulb off of connector 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Tail Lights Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights Replacement 1 Remove the two push pins from the tail light housing Push Pins Removed Removing Push Pins ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 2 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly to disengage the 3 Twist and remove socket from lamp lamp from the aperture panel oe 8180e6eb t Removing Socket and Bulb Pulling Lamp From Body 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Remove bulb from socket and replace Removing Bulb From Socket 8180e619 License Lights 1 Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove th
257. s Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE Operation Instructions CD Mode for MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for MP3 Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert
258. s Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do
259. s ENTER 5 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved User Defined Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the system clock you can manually adjust the time by choosing the User Defined Clock option 1 At the Clock Setup screen highlight Displayed Clock User Defined Clock 2 To increase the clock by hours make sure HR is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another hour You will see on the User Defined Time display the number of hours you have increased the clock by ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 3 To decrease the clock by one hour use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour 4 To increase the clock by minutes make sure MIN is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another minute 5 To decrease the clock by minutes use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute 6 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CAN CEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved Audio Clock Display Select this option to change the size of the clock on the audio screens 1 When you are at an audio sc
260. s deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the Side Curtain Airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions However even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you prop erly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled up in the rear seat 2 Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 3 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly refer to information on Child Restraint in this section should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats 4 Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buck led up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 5 If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint refer to information on Child Restraint in this section
261. s such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Material
262. same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SET DIR Button Radio Mode To Set the Religious Talk Religious_Talk Push Button Memory By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Rock Rock When you are receiving a station that you wish to Soft Soft commit to push button memory press the SET DIR button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display Soft a k Blues a window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this y a station and press and release that button If a button is Poe Sports not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET DIR Talk Talk button the station will continue to play but will not be Top 40 Top_40 stored into push button memory Weather Weather You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every t
263. scribed in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for Voice Command Tree the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section pane Help Command e For certain operations compound commands can be If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to used For example instead of saying Setup an
264. se Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion Apply grease to posts and clamps after tightening If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery dam age can result 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Produ
265. se Fuse Fuse 14 10 Amp IOD CCN Interior 23 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed Red Lighting Lt Blue 3 15 40 Amp RAD Fan Relay Bat 24 15 Amp Power Sunroof Feed Green tery Feed Lt Blue 16 15 Amp IGN Run Acc Cigar 25 10 Amp Heated Mirror Lt Blue Ltr Sunroof Red 17 10 Amp IOD Feed Mod Wcm 26 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed Red Lt Blue 2 18 40 Amp ASD Relay Contact 27 10 Amp IGN RUN Only ORC Green PWR Feed Red Feed 19 20 Amp PWR Amp 1 amp Amp 28 10 Amp IGN RUN ORC OCM Yellow 2 Feed Red Feed 20 15 Amp IOD Feed Radio 29 Hot Car No Fuse Re Lt Blue quired 21 10 Amp IOD Feed Intrus 30 20 Amp Heated Seats Red Mod Siren Yellow 22 10Amp IGN RUN Heat AC 31 10 Amp Headlamp Washer Red Compass Sensor Red Relay Control ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse 32 30 Amp ENG ASD Control e When installing the Integrated Power Module Pink Feed 1 cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop 33 10 Amp ABS MOD J1962 erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so Red Conn PCM may allow water to get into the Integrated Power 34 oe ABS Valve Feed Module and possibly result in an electrical system 35 40 Amp ABS Pump Feed Puls Green When replacing a blown fuse it is important to 36 30 Amp Headlamp Washer use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating Pink Control Smart Glass The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated 37 25 Amp 110 Inverter m
266. seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to
267. seconds When lit solid There is an 4WD system fault 4WD performance will be at a reduced level Service the 4WD system soon 4WD When blinking The 4WD system is temporarily dis abled due to overload condition 30 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages 31 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Button If Equipped Pushing this button will change the display to the choices available for EVIC ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED NU i NN Fn 101 9 P10 819197c5 EVIC Location The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located in the lower left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine tem perature gauge The EVIC consists of the following UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 e System Status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Personal Settings customer programmable features e Compass heading e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e UConnect hands free communication system dis plays If Equipped e Audio mode display e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime 172 UNDERSTAND
268. sed without using the key To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Liftgate Latch Location NOTE In the event of a power malfunction or the remote transmitter is inoperative insert the key into the liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right manual lock models only Using the liftgate handle pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion NOTE Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a snap in cap that provides access to release the latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint syst
269. sh fire causing serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up MANUAL TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline 230 STARTING AND OPERATING Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera tor pedal 80f7bc4b 5 Speed Shift Pattern Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transaxle is in 1st gear not 3rd when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in 3rd gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations 5th gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into R Reverse until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transaxle lubri cant is warm you may experience slight
270. side trim panel ne Mini Latch Stowage 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt oe 2l 4 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the mini Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a click 5 Sit back in seat Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See 6 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch 7 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your plate into the buckle until you hear a click abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up WR on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision gum Connecting Mini Latch to Buckle Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 8 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 9 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle Detaching Mini Latch and Buckle 10 To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for storage insert the reg
271. sis deta aes eee ie 344 Head Restraints llle 106 Heated sacan RE GSC PRSE 107 Lumbar Support 0000000 105 Rear Folding sep eser seo end 109 Rear Folding Sedan 000 109 Seatback Release llle 105 TIUS xr aen Sele boar at eid ate ee 105 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Sel ction of Oll vce RR RR eee 318 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 19 Sentry Key Programming sss 17 Sentry Key Replacement 16 en INDEX 395 Service Assistance llle 372 Service Contract sce cse 00540 bee yr eed 374 Service Manuals 0 0000 ee eeee 376 Setting the Clock 0 4 182 185 193 205 Settings Personal 6 0 0 e eee eee 175 Shift Speeds Manual Transaxle 231 Shoulder Belts socre ea nieri cee ee ee 35 Side Airbag cc eed t be e Re eee doe wed 52 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 222 Signals Tutti isse ah po We i m pd 354 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 238 Snow Chains Tire Chains 265 SNOW Tires s l bbe bbe eed p eae ees 275 Spare De aan coped ets aces ER ea a d RR ce 260 299 Spark Plugs theta 4 oe eee er Ee ED 320 Speakers Fold Down asiste setite ateata 152 Specifications OU no fats PIT 318 Speed Control Cruise Control 123 165 Speedotrieter ses eke Bee aes Ke Kee 161 run 227 Automatic Transmission
272. ss than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until you have displayed the Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Compass Variance is highlighted The Compass Variance message and the current variance zone number will be displayed To change the zone press and hold longer than two seconds the EVIC button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary with individual long for at least 1 second EVIC button presses for each increment until the desired variance is achieved To exit the Variance Programming press the EVIC button with a short less than one second button press 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE The factory default Zone is 8 During program ming the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 Compass Calibration The Compass will automatically calibrate if the Cal indicator is flashing by driving around slowly under 5 mph 8 km h in one or more complete circles in an area free from large metallic objects or power lines until the Cal indicator turns off If during normal use the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to manually calibrate the compass Prior to calibrating the compass make sure the proper zone is selected To Manually Calibrate the Compass star
273. ss the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the close position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and hold the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of the sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive
274. stem Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See your authorized dealer 3 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss an elevated rough idle and increased brake pedal effort and your vehicle may require towing Immediate service is required The light will come on when the ignition switch is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check This is normal If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 4 Oil Pressure Warning Light Si Shows low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine This can
275. switch is in the ON or START position Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Refer to Section 5 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS for system operation Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmissions Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC Use the EVIC button to display one of the following choices 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais depend ing on availability As you continue the displayed infor mation will be shown in the selected language NOTE UConnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection in the HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED section of this manual for details Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened
276. t It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possible loose or improperly installed A GASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some lo
277. t Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Duty Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Heavy Duty AII trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 1 2 4L Auto Man 22 Sq Ft 2 0
278. t any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example in USA 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid USA phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say c ERES System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phone book The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain r
279. t of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func tions Cuts off fuel to the engine Flashes hazard lights Turns on the interior lamps which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlocks the doors automatically 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Maintaining Your Airbag System Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in an impact While he airbag system is designed to be mainte Modifications to any part of the airbag system nance free if any of the following occurs have could cause it to fail when you need it You could an authorized dealer service the system be injured because the airbags are not there to promptly protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or The Airbag Warning Light does not cone Ona flickers stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is upper passenger side of the instrument panel Do first turned on not modify the front bumper vehicle body struc e The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second ture or frame interval You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate an
280. t results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rear view mirror to provide at least Y inch 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in during a voice recognition period motion is recommended e Performance is maximized under e It is not recommended to store similar sounding 1 TM low to medium blower setting names in the UConnect phone book e UConnect phone book nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the e low road noise phone book e low to medium vehicle speed e smooth road surface e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be e fully closed windows spoken eight zero zero e Even though intern
281. t the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position Using a short button press less than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until the EVIC displays the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Calibrate Compass Yes is displayed Using a long button press more than one second pressing the EVIC button will place the Compass in calibration mode The Cal indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the compass is now in the calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven to calibrate A short EVIC button press from the Cali brate Compass Yes screen will exit the EVIC Customer Programmable features and return it to its normal oper ating mode To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you
282. t to a stop the transaxle control logic will automatically select the 1st gear ratio e If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine Mostly the CVT will stay in the manually selected Autostick is deactivated ratio however e By holding the lever to momentarily e If the system detects powertrain overheating the issi i to the aut ic shift mod e When the shift lever is shifted out of D V a were cy aede capped and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off 5 ARSHURUGIpoSHpn a ES Wie HONORIUS ER e If the system detects a problem it will disable the e When heavy Anti lock brake system ABS application Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the is detected automatic mode until the problem is corrected 238 STARTING AND OPERATING ME FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED This feature provides full time on demand Four Wheel Drive AWD Four Wheel Drive Switch Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi tional traction is needed in sand deep snow or loose traction surfaces activate the 4WD LOCK switch by pulling up once and releasing This locks the center coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear wheels The amber 4WD Indicator Light will come on in the cluster This can be done on the fly at any vehicle speed To deactivate simply pull on the switch one more time The WD Indicator Light wil
283. ted on cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving WARNING e Cargo tie down Loops are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision WARNING To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Fold Down Speakers If Equipped REAR WINDOW FEATURES When the liftgate is open the speakers can swing down from the trim panel to face rearwar
284. teg eet erg es 303 MOWING aci aki dote INA RUE PNE 306 Emission Control System Maintenance 314 364 Engine i e y Re LEA 65 312 Break In Recommendations 65 Checking Oil Level 0000 317 COON eae 8 ec 8 s ode hee eee det 329 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 000002 eae 278 Fuel Requirements 0 0004 275 Jump Starting uuee d ed dena d terass aws 303 eM 317 360 361 Oil Change Interval 4 4 s0 ha piesa Goes 318 Oil Filler Cap aec sm eave de cess bees 312 319 CL BITE 333 de opea etat 9 eate 361 Qil Selection d eae ORE RS UR RR nen 318 Oil Synthetic icu et een 319 Operation kasd ac ces he Sada RR CR waa s 65 Overheating sporuna rer E Eee 296 Temperature Gauge 0 00000005 164 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 53 Event Data Recorder 0 0000 55 Exhaust Gas Caution 33 66 278 328 329 Exhaust System cioe sd th eres desta 328 Fabric C re 22 o hr Rea 344 Filters Air Cleanef ic 32 2d9 236 e RPR4 99 LT ea 323 Engine Fuel sesser bas eRe oa ERR a 323 Engine Oil i sedis esea t ee de 320 361 ElashetS cocus spere A SEE UU RED eA 296 Hazard Warning e c4 624 dusk dde y E 296 Tufti Signal aia heen eir xem eR Res 354 Flat Tire StoWage s cees coisa ii eia anea aih eeii 302 en INDEX 387 Flooded Engine Starting 0 228 Fiad Brakes 4 Aes td Sa ES eee a BS 362 Fluid Capacities isses iras aedes es 360 Fluid Leaks i
285. ten to FULL DAYTIME INTENSITY and will not be dimmable 26 Front Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are ON UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 27 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Iraction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS if 28 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the If Equipped driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your equipped ESP with BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible 29 4WD Warning Light If Equipped This light monitors the Four Wheel Drive 4WD system The light will come on for a bulb check when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as 3
286. tenance Procedures iles 317 Maintenance Schedule LL 365 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 168 314 Manual Service llle 376 Manual Transaxle ls 227 229 339 Downshif ng 22 1 pee pee 231 Fluid Level Check 005 340 341 Frequency of Fluid Change 340 341 Lubricant Selection 339 340 341 Map Reading Lights 205 113 Master Cylinder Brakes 005 337 Mirrors Tu caede PE hs de eaaa 2 bid ed 73 Electric Powered llle 74 Outside 23 59 te dI dedo Chee an XE eqs 73 R atvIeW Gris ac aniio bod en is RO aod nr E dos dA 73 b AP 76 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 266 Mopat Parts auae cerae OR RR ORO KE ar 316 375 Multi Function Control Lever Ls 114 Navigation Radio 6 0 eee 204 Navigation System sicer 0 ee 204 New Vehicle Break In Period 4 65 Occupant Restraints 6 6 6 6 iane a a ad 34 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 275 Odometer eeiam Ra ARR E Y MESS 167 THp aguced tins ia tingao e eiua eee des 165 167 Oil Change Indicator 0 00040 172 Oil Change Indicator Reset oec coc ccecce sas 172 Oil ENGINE ios xe ote de RR ae ios s 317 360 Capacity a4q wb pave eu ee sie eed al Ed eee ud 360 Change Interval der ke a distiid 318 Checking soria pe Tets Rep wid od
287. the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 MSG or INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the FF side of
288. the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Buttons 1 6 CD MODE for CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a sep
289. the ADD or MIN mark e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Change the engine oil filter e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if e Check the Manual Transmission fluid level required Once a Month CAUTION e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or Failure to perform the required maintenance items damage may result in damage to the vehicle M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 367 Required Maintenance Intervals Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 Rotate Tires 6 000 10 000 6 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner 12 000 20 000 12 filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 Replace the air conditioning filter 12 000 20 000 12 Inspect the CV Joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect Exhaust System Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months adii id 24 Inspect the front suspe
290. the UNLOCK button is pressed after 4 sec onds press the LOCK button Release both buttons 3 Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm The Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Programming Additional Transmitters Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters programmed only for that vehicle A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your vehicle Additional fobs can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob NOTE When entering program mode using that fob all other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Use the Following procedure to program additional key fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seatbelt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this program ming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Turn the ign
291. the button to move forward through the MP3 selection TUNE Control CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade AM FM Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND PTY Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure mm Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Bject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE REC AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM c704b4 Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability REC combines a CGlobal Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identification selection E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
292. the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee rear of the seat back Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Rear Seat Tether Anchors Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have describe
293. the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 252 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 811adOdO Tire Placard Location Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCC NEVER EXCEED XXX F T125 70D15 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RA 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires es STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
294. the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the a STARTING AND OPERATING 261 original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your Tire Spinning vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without vehicle at the first opportunity stopping when you are stuck WARNING Refer to Freeing A Stuck Ve
295. til ON or OFF appears to make your selection Delay Turning Headlamps Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlamps remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Headlamps On With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in this section Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system power sunroof and 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock When this f
296. ting Rear View Mirror Outside Mirror Driver s Side Adjust the Flat Drivers Side Outside Mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to vehicle with your head close to the door glass 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Power Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the The controls for the power mirrors are located on the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the driver s door trim panel vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Remote Control Mirrors Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Mirror Directions To adjust a mirror turn the control wand
297. tion pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under inflated Ac cordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem
298. tomatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME addition the Electronic Vehicle Information
299. tton for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 10 seconds If no discs are inserted within 10 seconds NO DISCS LOADED will be dis played On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner TUNE Control CD MODE for CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on
300. uirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 379 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
301. ular latch plate into the black button on the top of the mini buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Insert the mini latch plate into the slot provided in the trim panel Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See The pretensioners are triggered by the Airbag Control Module refer to information on Airbags in this section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle t
302. uld cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage brake controller is not required before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 lbs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 WARNING Ibs 907 kg Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and
303. ult in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle registration or title 8 INTRODUCTION EE VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Word About Your Keys 0 12 Ignition Key Removal sss 12 Locking Doors With The Key 14 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 ll Steering Wheel Lock Manual Transmission Only casae de cemacc eA a e I ERA 14 To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel 14 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 14 a Sentry Key 22a 9 REEREAORHER 3 Es 15 Replacement Keys ressa unine na waa 16 Customer Key Programming 17 General Information 005 18 H Security Alarm System If Equipped 18 To Set The Alarm essere 18 To Disarm The System 00 0 19 Security System Manual Override
304. undesired op eration SEATS Front Seat Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats near the floor Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired position Front Seat Adjustment Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using the ratcheting handle on the outboard side of the seat to adjust the driving position Seat Height Adjustment es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Manual Lumbar If Equipped Driver s Seat Back Recline The Lumbar adjustment is located on the outboard side To recline of the driver s seat To increase or decrease support 1 Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back rotate the handle up or down to the desired position and release the h
305. ure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturers specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected for prolon
306. urn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid E STARTING AND OPERATING 271 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update au
307. uster Description e ed retipa bes Pa headed 160 Warning Roll Over srercsertsedema nimas ama 4 Warnings and Cautions 04 7 Warranty Information 375 Washer Adding Fluid 122 153 Washers Windshield 119 Washing Vehicle 52 6 drehen ee ne x3 342 Water Driving Through 4 2 2 239 Wheel Alignment and Balance 264 Wheel and Wheel Trim 06 343 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 343 Wind BuffeBiig lisse oe baa wee eee Yrs 143 Window Airbag Side Curtain 46 52 Window Fogging lsseeeeee 221 Windows cow x 9 RR YG I Y LER EEG 31 POWT Sg iid cea eee RW eve a heh Lie dE aC 31 Windshield Washers 0 00000005 119 Windshield Wipers 00 4 119 328 Wiper Blade Replacement 328 Wipers Intermittent persiaa sti aas isau aaas 122 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 344 Information Provided by DEALER
308. utral but do not increase engine idle speed If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297 the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off imme diately and call for service NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn the air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range After appropriate action has been taken if the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or bo
309. utton is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for Rolling Code ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open amp close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for 2 sec onds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for 2 seconds to complete the training If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canad
310. view Mirror 00 005 73 Instrument Cluster llle ess 160 Instrument Panel and Controls 158 Instrument Panel Cover ssl 345 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 346 Integrated Power Module Fuses 347 Interior Appearance Care 000 344 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 122 Introduction sux eR ene eee ees 4 Jack Location llle 299 Jack Operation cie Rete 298 300 Jacking Instructions eses 2s 4 44 4s Res 300 Jump Starting ias bocre aura baie aa ee deae d 303 Key Programming esee 17 Key Replacement encased at ey X eee 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer llle 15 Key In Reminder 4 ers e ee 14 Keyless Entry System Sedan LL 19 Keys ce heii uke ta eset uos tooled one bd 12 Knee Bolster llle 46 Lane Change and Turn Signals 161 354 Lap Shoulder Belts 000 35 Latches HOO 0 ate are a RC Y Us 112 Lead Free Gasoline llle 275 Life of Tires 2212222 er Rx eR 262 Liftgate Sedan eel rr ges 32 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 152 Light Bulbs esi RR med 350 PAGING MEME 67 113 Airbag sx gb we gene Pa 51 54 67 161 Back Up ue uie e soe stes ce RR ae o cR es 354 Brake Warning 390 INDEX ae Bulb Replacement 004 351 Care 4g eae ES eed ea Ra eS 148 Center Mounted Stop lille 358 Daytime Running
311. y aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after air bag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavail able NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler such investigations may be requested by cust
312. y fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is defective Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch High Beam Control Push the Multi Function Control Lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the Lever toward you to switch the headlights back to Low beam 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Passing Light Off Road lights If equipped You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi Function Control Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released The auxiliary lights mounted on the front bumper f should be illuminated during Off Road Use Only NOTE If the Multi Function Control Lever is held in Having them illuminated on public streets high the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation when operating your vehicle on public streets high ways roads etc Further illuminating these lights with supplied covers installed could cause perma nent damage to the lamps or covers Before using these auxiliary lights contact your State Authorities for proper operation and use of these lights ways roads etc may be illegal in your state Your state may also require auxil
313. ydraulic Clutch Release System See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire braking You could have an accident CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid as seal damage will result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 Automatic Transaxle CVT Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid which has been formulated with special metal to metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys Refer to Fluids Lubrica
314. ystem Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book Lyes previous record again redial es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause
315. ystem provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected
316. ystem should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes The warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly Turn the ignition key to the on position but do not start the vehicle The light should come on If the light does not come on have the system checked by an authorized dealer 11 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will come on for about six seconds A chime will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt out of the retractor This is a reminder to buckle up If you do not buckle up the light will remain on 12 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi eee tion If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 14 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions in cluding brake fluid level and parking brake appli cation If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied there is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the anti lock brake system The dual brake s

2008 Jeep Compass Owners Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents